Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

Owner`s Manual - Dealer e
2016 Durango
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2016
16WD01-126-AB
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Durango
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a “Starting And Operating” for further information.
four-wheel drive vehicle.
INTRODUCTION 5
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing
better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- may not.
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
1
6 INTRODUCTION
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the Consult the following table for a description of the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or this Owner’s Manual:
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .21
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .29
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Remote Start Abort Message — If Equipped . . .30
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . .32
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . .37
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .50 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .68
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .108
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter (RKE Key Fob) and a Keyless Push Button
RUN will illuminate.
Ignition.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature — Passive Entry
the push of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a low or
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go — dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be
Passive Entry feature (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your (side opposite of the emergency key) of the RKE Key Fob
Vehicle⬙ for further information).
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the RKE Key
Fob is in the passenger compartment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove
box. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the RKE Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob) and an emergency key,
which stores in the rear of the RKE Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
RKE Key Fob
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Upon opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn
the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE Key Fob from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition in the
OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
SENTRY KEY
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorFrequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
or unlocked.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob), a Keyless Push Button Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only RKE Key
Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to
start and operate the vehicle. If an invalid RKE Key Fob
is used to attempt to start and operate the vehicle, the
system will not allow the engine to crank. If an invalid
RKE Key Fob is used to start the engine, the system will
shut the engine off in two seconds.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Customer Key Programming
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
is one that has never been programmed.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sysincluding interference that may cause undesired optem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
eration.
authorized dealer.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
And Operating⬙ for further information).
door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will proPassive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
is OFF.
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
— Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition
will flash.
system is OFF, and the key is physically removed
Rearming Of The System
from the ignition.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
vehicle:
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition START/
Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
STOP button (requires at least one valid RKE Key
Fob in the vehicle).
• Push the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
3. If any doors are open, close them.
— Passive Entry, insert a valid key into the ignition
To Disarm The System
switch and turn the key to the ON position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of NOTE:
the following methods:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
• Push the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Venot disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
hicle⬙ for further information).
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior Tamper Alert
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether ILLUMINATED ENTRY
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the RKE
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, Key Fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery outside mirrors.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
RKE Key Fob
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
hand-held RKE Key Fob. The RKE Key Fob does not need
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Fob once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above
seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal
disables the system from responding to all RKE Key Fob
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
buttons for all RKE Key Fobs.
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
Flash Lamps With Lock
flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key Fob.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE Key Fob. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current set1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under- Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn With Lock
NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors • The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature can be
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
horn will remain on.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
Using The Panic Alarm
vehicle when using the RKE Key Fob to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
by the system.
the PANIC button on the RKE Key Fob for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, Programming Additional Key Fobs
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
Programming Key Fobs or RKE Key Fobs may be perand the interior lights will turn on.
formed at an authorized dealer.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a Transmitter Battery Replacement
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
(24 km/h) or greater.
battery.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
the seal during removal.
dispose of them according to respect for environment
and local laws.
NOTE:
• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
specified by law or by taking them to an authorized
dealership, which will deal with their disposal.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
Separating RKE Key Fob Case
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over General Information
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
battery.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
4. Fit a new battery in place of the depleted battery. with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
battery to the + sign on the inside of the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch 2. This device must accept any interference received,
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
halves together until they are tightly clamped.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
This system uses the RKE Key Fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle • Hazard switch off
while still maintaining security. The system has • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • RKE PANIC button not pushed
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE Key Fob • Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
may reduce this range.
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
How To Use Remote Start
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an intrusion
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fobs away
from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could
cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The Remote Start Abort message stays active until the
ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the
RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
Remote Start Abort Message — If Equipped
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
The following messages will display in the instrument Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
NOTE:
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
Remote Start mode.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
• For security, power window and power sunroof opStart request.
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE Key Fob. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the cluster
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
display until you push the START button.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
General Information
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering
wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition
switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti- 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opvated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings.
eration.
For more information on Remote Start Comfort System
operation, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
2
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
Power Door Lock Switch
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
If you push the door lock switch while the ignition
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
position is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver or front
panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
passenger’s door is open, the doors will not lock.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door Doors
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h). To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Auto door lock feature is enabled/disabled in the Door Lock System
Uconnect Settings sections in the radio. Refer to
1. Open the rear door.
“Uconnect Settings” located in “Understanding Your
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
Instrument Panel.”
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
and in PARK. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower rewindow, and open the door with the outside door
sponse time.
handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft
door(s) without having to push the RKE Key Fob lock or (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
unlock buttons.
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature, which will function if the ignition is OFF.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door panel NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors with the handle and no RKE Key Fob is required.
have been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key
Fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob are detected outside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
third attempt, ALL doors will lock, and the Passive Entry
RKE Key Fob can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Push the electronic lift- 1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
gate handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: This feature will cause the horn to chirp when
the doors are locked with the door handle LOCK button.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0
This feature can be turned on or off. To change the
m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Underlocated to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate
will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate. For
further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Liftgate
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing NOTE:
the door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
Key Fob battery is dead.
• Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the
passive entry system.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
Key Fob lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
WINDOWS
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio Power Windows
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To open the window part way, push to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
“Auto Up” operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
Auto-Down Window Switches
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
“Auto Up,” it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during “Auto-Up.” If this happens, pull the
switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the
window manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, push the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
push the Window Lockout button again.
Should the “Auto Up” feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset “Auto Up”:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the
liftgate will unlock when you push the button on the
liftgate. For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear To Lock The Liftgate
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
located to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate handle to open with one fluid motion.
electronic liftgate handle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release handle (refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located
in “Things To Know Before Starting”) or by
pushing the LIFTGATE button on the RKE Key Fob. Push
the LIFTGATE button on the RKE Key Fob twice within
five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate
is open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a
second time will close the liftgate.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by NOTE:
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
overhead console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
can be closed by pushing the LIFTGATE button located
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftliftgate is in motion, pushing the LIFTGATE button
gate trim panel.
located on left rear trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE Key Fob is
time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
reset power liftgate functionality.
signal that the liftgate is preparing open or close (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect Settings)
WARNING!
and the liftgate chime (Selectable in Uconnect Settings)
will be audible. For further information, refer to During power operation, personal injury or cargo
⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
Panel.”
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE:
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the liftgate button
on the RKE Key Fob twice to operate the liftgate.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH • If the liftgate handle switch is pushed while the power
(0 km/h).
liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full
open position.
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures above 150° F • If the liftgate handle switch is pushed while the power
(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
allow manual operation.
liftgate switches.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manureverse to the closed or open position, provided it
ally.
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
(Continued)
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Some of the most important safety features in your 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
vehicle are the restraint systems:
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
• Seat Belt Systems
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙ in this
section of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
9.
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
position.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can Initial Indication
happen far away from home or on your own street.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermitcan reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
be belted at all times.
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccuBeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver pied.
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
Seat Belt Systems
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
Change Of Status
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
2
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an worn snugly and positioned properly.
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” in this section of
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- “Child Restraints.” The table below defines the type of
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or feature for each seating position.
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
60/40 Second Row (7 passenger)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
(Continued)
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
WARNING!
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo- This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec- certain types of rear impacts.
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
Seatback
Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
Head Restraint Guide Tubes
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING! (Continued)
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs
that could impair their function.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a
collision, the front half of the head restraint will be
extended forward and separated from the rear half of the
head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle
after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must
be reset into the original position to best protect the
occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA
AHR In Reset Position
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag System Components
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag Advanced Front Air Bags
system components:
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Air Bag Warning Light
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Steering Wheel and Column
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Instrument Panel
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
• Knee Impact Bolsters
the air bag covers.
• Advanced Front Air Bags
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
severe initial deceleration.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Impact Bolsters
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly.
In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretencollisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
Front Air Bags deploy.
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have dedeploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric- ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a bags will not be in place to protect you.
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
WARNING!
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immeparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air System serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye NOTE:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
but they will open during air bag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
authorized dealer immediately.
Procedure
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
Enhanced Accident Response System
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
eight-second interval.
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malremains on while driving.
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
again after initial startup.
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecThe ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncsystem immediately.
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosare recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
crash investigation.
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
WARNING!
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
vehicle or the EDR.
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
call 1-866-732-8243.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the combined weight of the child and the
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
the child restraint?
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use
belt be used together to attach a rearthe LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
N/A — 6 Passenger
7 Passenger: Use the seat belt and tether
position using the inner LATCH lower
No — 7 Passenger
anchor to install a child seat in the center
anchorages?
seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
using a common lower LATCH
two or more child restraints. If the center
anchorage?
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat?
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No — 6 Passenger
7 Passenger: Only the head restraint in
Yes — 7 Passenger
the center position may be removed.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
Locating Tether Anchorages — 2nd Row
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel away
from the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap
anchorages.
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
Locating Tether Anchorages — 3rd Row
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH:
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖInstalling
Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchoragesⴖ in the section ⴖInstalling Child Restraintsⴖ for
typical installation instructions.
2
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
seat backing.
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manumay need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
turer’s instructions.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them.
in any direction.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
2
Captains Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
60/40 Second Row (7 passenger)
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
Weight limit of the
Always use the tether anchor when using
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
Child Restraint
the seat belt to install a forward facing
the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
child restraint, up to the recommended
attach a forward facing child restraint?
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat
the back of the front passenger seat?
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No — 6 Passenger
7 Passenger: Only the head restraint in
Yes — 7 Passenger
the center position may be removed.
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt path
position with an ALR retractor.
of the child restraint?
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
“click.”
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage
for that seating position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
2
Top Tether Strap Mounting (60/40 Seat)
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the SAFETY TIPS
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a AREA.
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
Seat Belts
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
system.
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” for further information.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after Defroster
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Air Bag Warning Light
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperwill turn on for four to able.
The Air Bag warning light
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .123
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . .133
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .162
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Folding Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .145 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .167
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . .
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .153
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . .
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
. . .171
. . .172
. . .173
. . .173
. . .174
. . .175
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .175
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .176
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .177 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .183
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .179
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .186
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .188
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .181 䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . .190
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .198
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .199
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .205
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .210
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .211
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .214
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .225
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .236
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .240
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .242
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .244
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .246
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .248
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Relearn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .256
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .252 䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .261
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .253 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Front Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped . . . . .266 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped . . . .269
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .276
▫ Cargo Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Deploying the Crossbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . .272
▫ Stowing The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Outside Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
center on the view through the rear window.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
a 9-1-1 button.
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
features.
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
vehicle issues.
operator:
9-1-1 Call
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
(Continued)
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
• The Device Screen will display the following message beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
dealer.”
limited to, the following factors:
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de- • Delayed accessories mode is active.
vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global NOTE:
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
structed.
by the subscriber.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac• Weather.
ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
CAUTION!
The Drivers side mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the • Normal position
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
3
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror the visors.
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will automatically.
move slightly downward from the present position when
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
Rear Detection Zones
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operaand trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
tional. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated or the alert
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
chime remaining on the entire time the vehicle is in a
on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length
forward gear. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understarts at the outside rear view mirror and extends apstanding Your Instrument Panel” for more informaproximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
tion.
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
NOTE:
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Approaching
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
Opposing Traffic
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrutime, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
ment Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
be reduced.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approthe RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no
eration of the device.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
systems.
other than an authorized service facility could void
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
authorization to use this equipment.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS
used.
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
General Information
vehicle.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
WARNING!
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
Blind Spot Alert Off
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
Power Seat Switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion 1 — Seatback Switch
and the seatback.
2 — Seat Switch
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Reclining The Seatback
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING! (Continued)
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward
on the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of
the seat cushion, near the floor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle
is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
(Continued)
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
Front Heated Seats
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after apThe front heated seats control buttons are located within proximately 45 minutes.
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
two to five minutes.
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the
seats independently. The heated seat switches for each
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LOlevel heating. Push the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of indicator lights changes from two to
one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
a second time to
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a third time to
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
(AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head
restraints are not removable.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row
head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System.
Rear Head Restraint
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Headrest Fold button
third row head restraints.
to power fold the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded downward
using the Headrest button. The head restraints must be
raised manually when occupying the third row.
3
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Release Lever
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
3
Tumbled Second Row
Tumble Strap
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
(Continued)
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
To Raise Rear Seat
Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Fold the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Release Lever
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console there is
a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily access the
third row seats.
Tumble Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
To Raise Rear Seat
Fold the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the
pull strap located next to the release handle.
Third Row Folded
NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full upright
position, or tumbled when folding the third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap
located on the back of the seat.
Release Handles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE Key
Fobs, one RKE Key Fob can be linked to memory position
1 and the other Key Fob can be linked to memory
position 2.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door Programming The Memory Feature
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory following:
save function.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
(Do not start the engine).
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information
Display (DID) will display which memory position
has been set.
Memory Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE:
To program your RKE Key Fobs, perform the following:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in 1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
memory profile.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
• To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry instructions on how to set a memory profile.
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
Key Fob To Memory
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
Your RKE Key Fobs can be programmed to recall one of
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
in the instrument cluster.
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
5. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key
NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fobs you
Fob within 10 seconds.
must select the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature NOTE: Your RKE key fobs can be unlinked to your
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
further information.
button on the RKE key fob.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memory Position Recall
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory • To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 2 on
the memory switch.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Driver
Information Display (DID).
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
Driver One Memory Position Recall
RKE key fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE
key fob linked to memory position 2.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push MEMORY button number 1 on A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
the memory switch.
cancelled, the driver’s seat and steering column (if
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
RKE key fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE
before another recall can be selected.
key fob linked to memory position 1.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
vehicle.
or Easy Entry.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
Entry and Easy Exit position.
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Fearear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
position when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the
further information.
ACC or RUN position.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
Safety Latch Location
Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
Headlight Switch
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
position.
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the day• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
time, the vehicle will monitor outside brightness and
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
decide if the instrument panel needs to be dimmed or not.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruRefer to “Lights” in this section for further information.
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
used for normal nighttime driving.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high- vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
ignition off.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Headlight Delay
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
dealer.
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
engine is running, and the transmission is not in the delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE: The headlight delay time is programmable
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
headlights are required during the day.
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the
UNLOCK button is pushed on the RKE Key Fob, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Interior Lights
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Lights-On Reminder
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overafter the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when head console.
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
Front Map/Reading Lights
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
lights will automatically turn off.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
second time. The lights will also turn on when the Courtesy Lights
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
pushed.
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Ambient Light — If Equipped
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- steering column.
ity of the floor and center console area.
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Lane Change Assist
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. three times then automatically turn off.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn
off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for
low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Multifunction Lever
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
Intermittent Wiper Operation
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
NOTE:
If
the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
(16
km/h),
delay
times will be doubled.
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the cycles, then turn off.
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
WARNING!
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
intermittent interval previously selected.
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer Operation
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
shield.
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
further information.
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
following conditions:
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
NOTE:
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
3
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to
return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
130 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING!
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
(Continued)
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elecright side of the steering wheel.
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph)
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
the vehicle ahead.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
appropriate distance between vehicles.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
Control Mode” in this section.
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
NOTE:
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, the mode selected.
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle
does not start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must be
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
applied manually. An audible chime will sound
when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the parking brake is set.
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC • When the brakes are overheated.
Ready.”
• When the driver door is open.
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
“ACC Ready.”
To Activate/Deactivate
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
speed will only be determined by the position of the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
accelerator pedal.
will display the set speed.
To Cancel
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
• The brake pedal is applied.
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
the current speed of the vehicle.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position. • The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
To Resume
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
memory if:
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
To Turn Off
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
is pushed.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rebutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
flected in the DID.
in the DID.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The decrease in set speed is respeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
flected in the DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
NOTE:
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph • When you override and push the SET + button or SET decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle distance setting displays in the DID.
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
Brake Alert
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
(Continued)
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The ACC SET
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ instrument cluster.
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
the following displays in the DID:
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
• ACC Proximity Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
• ACC Unavailable Warning
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
• The DID will return to the last display selected after ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
five seconds of no ACC display activity
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
Display Warnings And Maintenance
this warning may temporarily occur.
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Warning
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” Control is still available. For additional information refer
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
section.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
tant to note the following maintenance items:
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
simply reactivating it.
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
NOTE:
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so • If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
require a sensor realignment.
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
your authorized dealer.
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
market grille or modifying the grille is not recomincluding transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
ACC/FCW operation.
malfunction.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
temporarily occur.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per- If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil- examine the windshield and the camera located on the
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
system may also become temporarily blinded due to require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
When the condition that created limited functionality is
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
no longer present, the system will return to full functiondisplay “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
ality.
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Towing A Trailer
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Turn Or Bend Example
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) To Set A Desired Speed
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONSpeed Control ON. When the vehicle has
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changreached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed ConSET (-) button and release. Release the acceltrol mode.
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON- U.S. Speed (mph)
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
speed control is SET.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To Vary The Speed Setting
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
To Increase Speed
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conin the DID display.
trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
Metric Speed (km/h)
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reThe speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
flected in the DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Cancel
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the • The CANCEL button is pushed.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • The ignition is turned off.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position. MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
To Resume Speed
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button Operation
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
20 mph (32 km/h).
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
To Turn Off
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
memory if:
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mitigate the potential collision.
ON/OFF button is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle comlooking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. two seconds and then release the brakes.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
FCW Message
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
may provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision message will be deactivated.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Turning FCW ON Or OFF
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should The forward collision button is located in the Uconnect
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the display in the controls settings.
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
button once to turn the system OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
collision button again to turn the system ON.
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
in front of you.
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
collision.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the Active Braking is in the “On” setting. This allows the
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front when the distance between the
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
FCW Limited Warning
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
NOTE:
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the fully available. Once the condition that limited the sysdriver after ignition shut down.
tem performance is no longer present, the system will
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as return to its full performance state. If the problem peroverhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the sists, see your authorized dealer.
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, Service FCW Warning
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
screens.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear • The automatic braking function may only be applied if
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collidduring a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped
ing with a detected obstacle.
with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
be automatically applied and released when performing
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
possible collision with an obstacle.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
NOTE:
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
• The driver can override the automatic braking funcsection of the Uconnect System.
tion by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
for the automatic braking function through ignition
automatic brakes are being applied.
cycles.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob- REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
NOTE:
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper• The driver is always responsible for controlling the ating speed, a warning will appear within the Driver
Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is
vehicle.
too fast. The system will become active again if the
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxisubstitute the driver.
mately 6 mph (9 km/h).
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
ParkSense Sensors
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
vehicle’s movements.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita- within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
tions of this system and recommendations.
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
changed to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the DID.
It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
ParkSense Display
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat- the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
ing the system status.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
3
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(150-100
cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2
Second
Tone
None
None
None
None
Arcs-Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Yes
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the DID will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
through ignition cycles.
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense the LED will be ON.
switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
bumper.
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the DID will
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
vehicle is in REVERSE.
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the DID.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver. ⬙Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.⬙ The following table
shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
3
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
indicator flashes.
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
2.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
3.
activates, programming is complete.
Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the before 1995.
channels.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
program while you push and hold the hand-held (Non-Rolling Code)
transmitter button.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- follow these steps:
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
release the button.
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
and observe the indicator light.
remaining steps.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiseveral seconds of transmission.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigfully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
door may open and close while you are programming.
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
NOTE:
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, Using HomeLink
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink
erase the channels.
button. Activation will now occur for the trained device
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The handprogramming, plug it back in at this time.
held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
time.
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
Security
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps:
in your vehicle.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/ The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remaining steps.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Sunshade Operation
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
3. Push and hold the Close switch. The sunroof will hit
the hard stop and move to the Vent position after 10
The power sunroof switch will remain active in Accesseconds.
sory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening 4. Release the Close switch, then push and hold the
either front door will cancel this feature.
Close switch again within 5 seconds to begin the
teaching process. The sunroof will complete one full
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
cycle and return to the Fully Closed position.
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru- NOTE: If the Close switch is released anytime during the
ment Panel” for further information.
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated
starting from the first step.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there is a relearn 5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully Closed
position, release the Close switch. The sunroof is now
procedure that allows you to calibrate the sunroof when
reset and ready to use.
the “Auto Up” feature stops working. To reset the
Ignition OFF Operation
sunroof, follow these steps:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the Fully Closed position.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
need to be replaced.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Imto the battery and powered at all times.
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
NOTE:
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
3
Front Power Outlet
Front Center Console Outlet
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center console, The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
there is also a power outlet located in the lower storage cargo area.
area of the rear full center console.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel from
fuse location F90 to F91.
3
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Cupholders
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
located in the center console.
Front Cupholder Location
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
The rear full console cupholders are equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
located in the front of the rear full console.
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Full Console Cupholders — If Equipped
Rear Full Console Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Full Console Cupholders
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Mini Console Cupholders — If Equipped
STORAGE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers Glove Compartment
located in the front of the rear mini console.
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Mini Console Cupholders
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the
latch and lower the glove box door.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy the small latch located on the lid.
access.
3
Storage Compartment Latches
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
Door Panel Storage
lower storage compartment.
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
Upper Storage Compartment
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment
NOTE: Lower storage compartment light is always on
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on with ignition in the ON/RUN position.
the small latch located on the front of the lid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or devices with cords routing through upper storage
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
Lower Storage Compartment
The upper storage compartment may also be lifted forward. Push in the release button located on the back of
the lid.
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When lifted forward there is access to the lower storage lowered below fold flat seat plane and protect the armcompartment.
rest vinyl from damage when using the vehicle to haul
cargo.
Lower Storage Compartment
NOTE: When the lower storage compartment is accessed it allows the armrest to flip forward for “fold flat
mode”. Fold flat mode allows the console armrest to be
Fold Flat Mode
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable liners, Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped
are located rearward of the cupholders and in the lower An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable liner,
front of the console.
is located in the front of the console.
3
Console Cubby Bins
Console Cubby Bin
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Push in on the flashlight to release it.
Push And Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once for high, Cargo Storage
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side
of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Three-Push Switch
Load Floor Handle
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
the pillar trim cover.
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
place.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
WARNING! (Continued)
Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
(Continued)
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
(Continued)
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
the first detent for intermittent operation and to OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
is released the pump will resume normal operation.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Deploying the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
3
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
Thumb Screw
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding
the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot supports
at each end.
Removing Crossbars
Bending Pivot
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the
the side rail.
crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
Positioning Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the Stowing The Crossbars
deployment of the crossbars.
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot supports at each end.
Deployed Crossbars
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
3
Crossbar Pivot
Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Tightening Crossbar
Crossbar To Side Rail
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
opposite side.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
3
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
Stowed Crossbars
CAUTION!
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
NOTE:
(Continued)
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ DID Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .292
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .335
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .324
▫ DID Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .360
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .378
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .378
▫ Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device . .379
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Second Row USB Charging Port . . . . . . . . . . .380
䡵 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .393
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .396
▫ Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
䡵 CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc MAINTENANCE . . . . .405
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .405
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .416
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . .418
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .444
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Ignition Start/Stop Button
9 — Dimmer Switch
10 — Headlight Switch
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
5. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
• The Driver Information Display (DID) features a
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
driver-interactive display. Refer to “Driver Informaevent of a failure indication.
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your InstruAll active telltales will display first if applicable. The
ment Panel” for further information.
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster
until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, a single chime will sound.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn on when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
as soon as possible if this occurs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
(Continued)
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact your local authorized dealer for service.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
AWD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
AWD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the all-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. AWD LOW is designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Refer to “All Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further information
on all-wheel drive operation and proper use.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system when the system is engaged. Refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is engaged. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The DID Menu items consists of the following:
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver- • Speedometer
interactive display that is located in the instrument
• Vehicle Info
cluster.
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
DID Cluster Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
DID Steering Wheel Buttons
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or submenu
item.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• OK Button
• Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)
Push the OK button to access/select the information • Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
Fuel Economy)
and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• AWD Status — If Equipped
DID Displays
The main display area will normally display the main
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
cluster and consist of multiple sections:
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
into several categories:
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
• Five Second Stored Messages
white for on demand information.
• Sub-menu Dots— Whenever there are submenus When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
available, the position within the submenus is shown message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
here.
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
• Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
condition that activated it remains active) and can be • Five Second Unstored Messages
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. ExWhen the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
amples of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal
message takes control of the main display area for five
Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
• Unstored Messages
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples Engine Oil Life Reset
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
Oil Change Required
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
driving style.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Oil Change Reset Procedure
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
1. Without depressing the brake pedal, push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ on
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
DID.
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
3. Push and Hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
100%.
within 10 seconds.
DID Messages
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the Includes the following, but not limited to:
ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Anti-lock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• ACC Override
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Lights On
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Ignition or Accessory On
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Doors Open
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
• Hood Open
• Remote Start Canceled Too Cold
• Shift Not Allowed
• Remote Start Canceled Door Open
• Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
• Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
• Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
• Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
• Service Transmission
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Service Shifter
• Service Air Bag System
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or green telltales area on the right, and the amber
or red telltales area on the left.
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Door Open
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the DID.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Speedometer icon is
displayed in the DID. Push and release the
or RIGHT
arrow button to
Analog LEFT
change the speedometer type (Analog or
Digital). Push and release the OK button to
toggle units (MPH or km/h) of the speedometer.
Digital
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon/title
is highlighted in the DID. Push the LEFT
or RIGHT
arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus
Tire Pressure Monitor System
or RIGHT
arrow
Push and release the LEFT
button until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID.
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To Oil Pressure
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
• Displays the actual oil pressure.
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a Oil Life
different color than the other tire pressure value.
Battery Voltage
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function, and cannot be
reset.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Driver Assist display
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. For
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
further information, refer to “Adaptive
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “UnderTransmission Temperature
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temperature
• Displays the actual oil temperature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Fuel Economy
Trip
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu
arrow button until the Trip icon/title is highicon/title is highlighted. Push the LEFT or
lighted in the DID, then press and release
or RIGHT
arrow button to
RIGHT arrow button to scroll the submenus,
the LEFT
one with current fuel economy display and one with- select Trip A or Trip B.
out it.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
• Range
following:
• Current MPG or L/100 km
• Distance
• Average MPG or L/100 km
• Average Fuel Economy
• Press the OK button to rest the current and average • Elapsed Time
fuel economy
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
NOTE: The Range feature is not able to be reset through
the DID Controls.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start — If Equipped
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the
RIGHT
arrow button will allow you to see what
the stored messages are.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Stop/Start icon/title Screen Setup
is highlighted in the DID. The screen will
display the Stop/Start status.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
Audio
arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Audio Menu icon/ submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as
needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
title is highlighted in the DID.
change what information is displayed in the instruStored Messages
ment cluster as well as the location that information is
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button displayed.
until the Messages Menu icon/title is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Screen Setup
Current Gear
NOTE: Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK
button to choose whether to show or hide this menu on
the DID display.
• On
• Off (default setting)
Favorite Menus
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist (Show/Hide)
• Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
• Trip (Show/Hide)
• Stop/Start
• Audio (Show/Hide)
• Navigation (Show/Hide)
• Stored Messages
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
• Restore
• Cancel
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the
driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID).
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low • Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• HVAC System
• The charging system is independent from load reduc- • 115V AC Power Inverter System
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the • Audio and Telematics System
charging system continuously.
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may the following conditions:
indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to
“Battery Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding • The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. • The battery was used for an extended period with the
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towconsoles and similar devices.
ing, frequent stopping).
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec- message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar Saver Mode”)
devices.
During a trip:
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long • Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
parking periods).
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
(weeks, months).
+12V, 115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
– Check the audio settings (volume)
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
After a trip:
CYBERSECURITY
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security featime and parking time).
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
• The vehicle should have service performed if the access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
message is still present during consecutive trips and Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
not help to identify the cause.
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio
Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
4
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
Faceplate
access and change the customer programmable features.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
Many features can vary by vehicle.
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4N Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons
On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Personal Settings
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the “Up” or “Down”
Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety &
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/ in the RUN position.
Bluetooth, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal
Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
the following settings will be available.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
• Display Mode
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
“Manual” display settings. To change mode status, press ⬙parade⬙ positions.
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
touchscreen.
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
NOTE: When “Day” or “Night” is selected for the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness
Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
control even though the headlights are on.
Display
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
When in this display, you may select the overall screen the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness ⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• Set Language
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
measure are listed below:
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the naviga- • Speed
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan• Distance
guage button on the touchscreen.
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the • Fuel Consumption
sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the “km/L.”
touchscreen then select from “On” or “Off.”
• Pressure
Units
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed • Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchfollowing settings will be available:
screen the following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
• Set Time & Format
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Long.”
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
a “12 hour” or “24 hour format.” Press the corresponding
arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
select “AM” or “PM.”
• Show Command List
• Set Date
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List When in this display, you may set the date manually.
settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding
touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
“Never.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors
• ParkSense
In Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the selection.
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE • ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will
provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound Only” or display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
“Sounds and Display” button. Refer to “ParkSense” in The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five secfunction and operating information.
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
Safety/Assistance
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView Backup Camera Delay push the MORE button
on the faceplate, the “settings” button on the touchscreen,
then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay”
button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay
ON or OFF.
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and
make your selection.
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable”
button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near”, “Medium”
or “Far” button.
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise ConPress the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. This feature can be enabled or disabled by
pressing the “Forward Collision Warning” button on the
center stack. The feature can be can be set to Far, Medium
or Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen, indicating that the setting had been selected. • Blind Spot Alert
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the DID or Uconnect System — if equipped. will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Rear Chime
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Volume” button on the touchscreen, indicating that the
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
setting had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Brak- the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
ing Assist” button on the touchscreen, indicating that the not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
setting had been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor Key Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose
either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds.
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Lights
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
following settings will be available.
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
• Headlights Off Delay
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay the touchscreen and make your selection.
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
• Auto High Beams — If Equipped
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will
activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
To make your selection, press the “Auto High Beams”
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your • Auto Door Locks
Vehicle” for further information.
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
or “Off.”
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch• Auto Unlock On Exit
screen and make your selection.
• Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key
Fob or the Passive Entry Feature. To make your selection,
press the “Flash Lights w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchwhen the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
screen the following settings will be available.
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob or the Passive Entry
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select “Driver”
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” to have the only the driver door open with the first push of
the key fob.
or “Off.”
• Horn w/Lock
NOTE: Passive Entry — If Equipped. If “All” is selected,
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door
Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your selection, handle is grasped. If “Driver” is selected, only the
press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on the touch- driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
screen and select from “Off,” ”1st Press,” or “2nd Press.” grasped.
• Passive Entry
• Horn w/Remote Start — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.” Refer to
• Remote Door Unlock
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before StartWhen “Remote Door Unlock” is selected, you may choose ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
from “Driver” or “All.” Select “All” to have all doors
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Memory Linked to Fob — If Equipped
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.”
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is used to
unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts.”
• Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is Engine Off Options
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
“Power Lift Gate Alert” button on the touchscreen and touchscreen the following settings will be available.
select from “On” or “Off.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. Press the “EnWhen this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
gine Off Power Delay” button on the touchscreen and
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
choose from “0 sec,” “45 sec,” “5 min” or “10 min” to
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”
select your desired time interval.
button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
• Headlight Off Delay
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press the “Headlight Off Delay” NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
button on the touchscreen and choose from “0,” “30,” compass variance zone should be set for best results.
“60,” or “90” seconds to select your desired time interval. • Compass Variance
• Engine Off Power Delay
Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
When this feature is selected, the power window this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if map figure.
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.
Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide
the most accurate compass headings.
• Compass Calibration
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
located, and it can cause interference with the compass
sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
the touchscreen.
following settings will be available:
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
• Equalizer
Audio
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center. • Loudness — If Equipped
• Balance/Fade
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Subscription Information
• Paired Devices
Phone/Bluetooth
This feature shows which phones are paired to the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch- Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
screen, the following settings will be available:
to access the Subscription Information screen.
• Channel Skip
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to the screen or visit the provider online.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
and is available for U.S. residents only.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Restore Settings
• Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
• Restore Settings
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” System Information
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the After pressing the “System Information” button on the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings touchscreen the following information will be available:
reset to default.⬙
• System Information
Clear Personal Data
When System Information is selected, a System InformaAfter pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on tion screen will appear displaying the system software
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
version.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
Press the “Apps” or the “Controls” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on the touch- the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
screen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Display
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
the following settings will be available.
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings,
• Display Mode
Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4 Personal Settings
When in this display you may select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status, select from “Day,”
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears next to the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option, setting, showing that setting has been selected.
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
been selected.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
even though the headlights are on.
touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
⬙parade⬙ positions.
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the • Set Theme
touchscreen.
This feature will allow you to choose a background
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with theme for the display screen. The theme will change the
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and background color, highlight color, and button color of the
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or display screen.
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Set Language
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
When in this display, you may select the brightness with languages (English/Français/Español) for all display
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
gation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” • Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster —
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lan- If Equipped
guage button on the touchscreen.
When this feature is selected, To make your selection, press
• Touchscreen Beep
the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed.
Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen Units
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
that setting has been selected.
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
• Controls Screen Time-Out
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
measure are listed below:
ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the
“Controls Screen Time-Out” button on the touchscreen • Speed
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
that setting has been selected.
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• Fuel Consumption
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
• Show Command List
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Voice
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the Clock
following settings will be available:
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
• Voice Response Length
following settings will be available:
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response • Sync Time With GPS
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,
press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the touchscreen This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS
signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check- • Time Format
mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
This feature will allow you to select the time format
been selected.
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
• Set Time Hours
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the “12
hrs” or “24 hrs” setting, showing that setting has been
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
selected.
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
down.
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
• Set Time Minutes
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” Safety & Driving Assistance
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
down.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. This feature can be enabled or disabled by
pressing the “Forward Collision Warning” button on the
center stack. The feature can be can be set to Far, Medium
or Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near”, “Medium”
or “Far” button.
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable”
button on the touchscreen.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. For further
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of
Vehicle”.
Your Vehicle.”
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkSense
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known conThe ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
figuration state through ignition cycles.
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph • Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Brakvisual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The ing Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re- been selected.
lease the “Sound” or “Sound and Display” button. Refer
to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of Your • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
Vehicle” for system function and operating information. When this feature is selected, the exterior side view
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the DID or Uconnect System — if equipped.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Rear Chime
Volume” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
• Blind Spot Alert
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be • ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn display along with a caution note to “check entire sursignal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot roundings” across the top of the screen. After five secMonitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the onds, this note will disappear. To change the mode status,
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is selected.
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls”
button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the
touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance”
button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup
camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the
ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
60 sec or 90 seconds.
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer- • Headlight Illumination On Approach
ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press
a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your
Lights
desired time interval.
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the • Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
following settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
• Headlight Off Delay
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apWhen this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to • Flash Lights With Lock
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key
Fob. This feature may be selected with or without the
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conselection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp Doors & Locks
Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchOf Your Vehicle” for further information.
screen the following settings will be available.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on When this feature is selected, all doors will lock autowhenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on (24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
selected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock on Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
RKE Key Fob).
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button. You must • Passive Entry
press the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
the passenger’s doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for door(s) without having to press the RKE Key Fob lock or
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the “Pasfirst press of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button.
sive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, touchscreen the following settings will be available:
showing that setting has been selected.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE Key Fob is used to unlock the door. When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
• Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button on the touchraising or lowering. To make your selection, press the screen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All
“Power Lift Gate Chime” button on the touchscreen, until Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, showa check-mark appears next to setting, showing that ing that setting has been selected.
setting has been selected.
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Power Delay status press the press the “+” or
“-” button to choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,”
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
“5 minutes,” or “10 minutes.”
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
• Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
Engine Off Options
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit
Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
When this feature is selected, the power window following settings will be available.
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), • Balance/Fade
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
• Equalizer
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Offset
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
• Loudness — If Equipped
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
directly on the desired setting.
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Phone/Bluetooth
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touchscreen the following settings will be available:
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Paired Phones
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Paired Audio Sources
with only a few seconds left to play. To make your
selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touchThis feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
screen, select “On” or “Off.”
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
• Channel Skip
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchundesirable channels while scanning. To make your selecscreen, the following settings will be available:
tion, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen,
• Tune Start
select the channels you would like to skip followed by
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of • Subscription Information
the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
during that current song. Tune Start works in the backwith your radio. Following the expiration of the free
ground, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your
settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to
to access the Subscription Information screen.
exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears
Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To
stating ⬙Settings Reset To Default.⬙
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
Clear Personal Data
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
and is available for U.S. residents only.
• Clear Personal Data
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
• Restore Settings
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal Data Cleared.”
“Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Information
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
After pressing the “System Information” button on the This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
touchscreen the following information will be available: plugged into the USB port, located in the lower section of
the front integrated center stack, in front of the rotary
• System Information
transmission gear selector.
When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
version.
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplerefer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
ment Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external the vehicles iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or
USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use.
which is located in the center console.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX SD Card Media
HUB
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using This Feature
Second Row USB Charging Port
By using an iPod cable, or an external USB device to Second row USB connector ports can be used for chargconnect to the USB port:
ing purposes only. Use the connection cable to connect an
iPod or external USB device to the vehicle’s USB charging
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
ports which are located either on the rear of the front
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
center console and/or in the second row center console.
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
NOTE: For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Supplement Manual.
Front Center Console Rear USB Ports
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over
the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
Second Row Center Console USB Port
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the • Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray Disc
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray Disc Player, the icon
will be present on the Player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pushing the Power button on the remote control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Bluray Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
RSE System Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
4
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
(passenger side).
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray Disc player is located in the center console.
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side
rear passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE:
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio press the “Media”
button on the touchscreen, then press the “Disc”
button. Press the “Play” button, then the “full screen”
button.
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player with the • Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The
available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must
radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after
be stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen,
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
the language screen, or starts playing the first track.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touchscreen Radio
is not highlighted select button to access controls for
Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle.
Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Rear Media Control Screen
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2; This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1; This Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/ is not highlighted select button to access controls for
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
6. Radio Full Screen Mode
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen),
7. Cabin Audio Mode
then press the source key and using the up and down
Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
button.
control screen.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
8. RSE Mode
and options.
Select this button to change source for the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
screen.
Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, then press
the Rear Media button on the touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin
playing the Blu-ray Disc on the touchscreen radio.
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat. directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
Play Video Games
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label facing as
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc player. The radio
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
ENTER/OK.
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment
Screen
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, the select
source button on the touchscreen and then the DISC
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect radio touchbutton on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column. To
screen.
exit press the X at the top right of the screen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
Rear Media Control Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control —
Blu-ray Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote If Equipped
control functions for DVD play such as scene selection,
Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
4
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source
will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source
will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls And Indicators
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus.
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone 6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward through the
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
current audio track or video chapter.
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is
play.
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray Disc
features.
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
shuffle options, the Blu-ray Disc popup menu, the
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
DVD title menu or to access disc menus.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan- 11. KEYPAD — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
nel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
12. ▪ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind through the The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
current audio track or video chapter.
14.
— Mutes headphone audio.
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
source selection screen.
according to the polarity diagram shown.
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
17. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
18. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector 3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
switch.
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and push the OK button to
select the new mode.
Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferBACK button on the remote control.
able.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
as long as you own the Product.
operation. To replace the batteries:
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover use is defective in workmanship or materials.
downward.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them does not cover any damage or defect that results from
according to the polarity diagram shown.
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-3332
or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by
phone at 1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired re- When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or DVD
Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.),
pushing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc player’s
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
screen closed:
are installed in the headphones.
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
Disc Formats
• Close the video screen.
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of the playing the
• To change the current audio mode, push the remote following types of 4.7 in (12 cm) diameter discs :
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically se• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
lect the next available audio mode without using the
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
Mode/Source Select menu.
DVD-VR
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate • CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
display menu or media.
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
profile 3.0
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DVD Region Codes
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play.
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray Disc
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDAudio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
supported.
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 CD-RW).
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension
to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
always end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
WMA files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
or ⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
playable in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc
these extensions for any other types of files.
recording software publisher for more information about
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
burning playable discs.
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. • Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
The Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
DVD player.
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Disc Errors
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a
player will automatically skip the file and begin play⬙Disc Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and
ing the next available file.
Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
supported. For both formats, the recommended
skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play
Blu-ray Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next the start of the first track.
file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during exor previous file.
tremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this
occurs, the player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics EQUIPPED
of the Blu-ray Disc player.
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
Product Agreement
access the switches.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch will tune to the next preset station that you have probetween the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ grammed in the radio preset button.
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
CD Player
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
control is different depending on which mode you are in. track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The following describes the left-hand control operation in beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
each mode.
after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc in good condition, take
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
the following precautions:
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. before considering disc player service.
CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc MAINTENANCE
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
wiping from center to edge.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
ing the disc.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opThe internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
eration.
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific NOTE:
community.
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitprovide reasonable protection against harmful interted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system dis• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to play.
radio or television reception, which can be determined When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
more of the following measures:
display.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Overview
Buttons On The Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect system screen.
Uconnect screen.
Buttons On The Faceplate
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
The Faceplate And The Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. AUTO Operation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
7. Rear Climate Control Button
slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again
automatically exit Sync.
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
10. SYNC
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
the passenger temperature setting with the driver temslide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
13. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
amount of air is directed through the defrost adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Climate Control Functions
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time. button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
16. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger com- NOTE:
partment. Moving the temperature bar into the red area, • For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed. adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of Recirculation
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
you may wish to recirculate interior air
by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn
mance.
off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the vehicle.
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
MAX A/C
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the
touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
NOTE:
Manual Operation Override
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
units by selecting the Uconnect customer- allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
Settings” in this section of the manual.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will selected in Manual operation.
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from
each other. If any feature is controlled manually, temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are located
in the Uconnect system, located on the instrument panel.
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Rear Climate Controls
Touchscreen
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Press Blower Up Button
Press Mode Button
Press Temperature Button
Press Blower Down Button
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Press
Press
Press
Press
Done Button
Rear Lock Button
Rear Auto Button
Rear Off Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display will appear. Control functions now
operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Controls
Touchscreen
1 — Press Rear Auto Button
2 — Press Rear Lock Button
3 — Press Front Climate Button
4 — Press Temperature Up
Button
5 — Press Temperature Down
Button
6 — Press Blower Up Button
7 — Press Mode Button
8 — Press Blower Down Button
9 — Press Rear Off Button
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
controlled from the front Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center
of the vehicle.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed
2 — Rear Temperature
3 — Rear Mode
4 — Rear Temperature Lock
5 — AUTO Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the Rear Blower Control
Uconnect touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Tem- The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
perature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs. volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
4
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
Rear Mode Control
• Auto Mode
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
The rear system automatically maintains the correct • Floor Mode
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occuAir comes from the floor outlets.
pants.
• Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
Operating Tips
Winter Operation
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
suggested control settings for various weather condi- is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
tions.
Summer Operation
Vacation Storage
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for The climate control system filters outside air containing
long periods, as fogging may occur.
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Uconnect 5.0
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
4
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions.
For 8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And
Climate Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 5.0 Media
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
4
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Okay.
Where are you?
I will be
<number>
Are you there
Call me.
minutes late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
4
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
4
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
WiFi Hotspot***
9-1-1 Call
**If vehicle is equipped.
Security Alarm Notification
***Extra charges apply.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Vehicle Health Alert
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your 3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
vehicle and handle all of the details.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Assist Button
4
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
To link your internet radio accounts:
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com- 1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
Mobile App
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
NOTE:
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
. After
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply 1. To send a message, push the Phone button
the beep, say the following command: “Send mesvisit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
sage to John Smith.”
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
process your message.
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
4
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
TIP:
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be 2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
illuminated to use the feature.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
4
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
Yelp
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com- Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
mand.
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set
reminders, and more. For further information go to the
Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
4
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic reply messages can be:
General Information
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac- two conditions:
ters.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
received including interference that may cause undeWhile in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
sired operation.
so you can still place a second call without being interNOTE:
rupted by incoming calls.
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPapproved by the party responsible for compliance could
hones.
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on • The term IC before the certification/registration numphones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speciNOTE:
fications were met.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
Additional Information
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours
a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . .461
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .462
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .462
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .463
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .463
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .459
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .465
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .466
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . .475 䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Three-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . .476
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . .
▫ When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped . . . .482
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . .
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . .
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .484
. . . .488
. . . .490
. . . .491
. . . .491
. . . .491
. . . .492
. . . .493
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .517
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .520
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .529
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .541
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .531
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .532
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Service TPM System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .547
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
䡵 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .566
▫ Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob is
in the passenger compartment.
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
the engine starting, push the button again.
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
STOP button is pushed once, the DID will display a
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
“Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will
pedal.
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
4. If the gear selector is in Neutral, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position.
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these
steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position.
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
the ignition to the ACC position (DID will display
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
“ACC”).
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (DID will
OFF position.
display “ON/RUN”).
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
return the ignition to the OFF position (DID will
NEUTRAL Position)
display “OFF”).
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
WARNING! (Continued)
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and Automatic Mode
hold it.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
if all other conditions are met, can go into a
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
After Starting
Occur:
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will • The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
decrease as the engine warms up.
the Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Start section. Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce fuel
further information.
consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are • The vehicle must be completely stopped.
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator • The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal will automatically re-start the engine.
pedal depressed.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to • The vehicle is on a steep grade.
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptnate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
will be maintained upon return to an engine running
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
condition.
speed.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many • HVAC set to MAX A/C.
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. • Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the DID Stop/Start • The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not • Hood is open.
stop:
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Engine temp too high.
• Battery charge is low.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
AUTOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several • HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
times without the STOP/START system going into a
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
STOP/START READY state under more extreme condiadjusted.
tions of the items listed above.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the • Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
applications).
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en- • STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
gine restart.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and
back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver In2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in formation Display (DID)“ in “Understanding Your InDriver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver strument Panel” for further information.
STOP/START Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the DID, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
5
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove the Key Fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition is
in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
shifting out of PARK.
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
Ignition Park Interlock
stopped or moving at low speeds.
This vehicle is equipped with a Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle’s
overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions.
Push the “eco” switch in the center stack of the instrument
panel to activate or disable ECO mode. An amber light on
the switch indicates when ECO mode is disabled.
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the Driver Information Display (DID). To
select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
paddles mounted on the steering wheel). Pressing the
shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE range will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster. Refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
5
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (shift
Electronic Gear Selector
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the electronically
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. shifted transfer case, ensure that the transfer case is in
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
AWD AUTO or LOW RANGE position on the AWD
Control Switch. Ensure that the NEUTRAL position light
PARK (P)
is NOT illuminated.
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
WARNING!
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
range.
fully when parked to guard against vehicle moveGear Ranges
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove the Key Fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition
is “OFF”, remove the key fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. The transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
REVERSE (R)
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector stop.
could result.
NEUTRAL (N)
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
the drivetrain.
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
The following indicator should be used to ensure that leave the vehicle.
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
WARNING!
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enTransmission function is monitored electronically for
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 1. Stop the vehicle.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
turns OFF.
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
indicate what actions may be necessary.
5. Restart the engine.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
following steps:
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE, it will operate
automatically, shifting between the eight available gears.
To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering
wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-). Tapping (-) to enter
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick mode
service is required.
will retain the current gear. When AutoStick is active, the
AutoStick
current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature cluster.
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine NOTE: The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled,
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, as desired) using the Uconnect Personal Settings.
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
can also provide you with more control during passing, when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result.
trailer towing, and many other situations.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or • The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the • Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
display the current gear.
speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
AutoStick is enabled.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
vehicle is accelerated.
fault or overheat condition is detected.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+)
Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear.
shift paddle until ⬙D⬙ is once again indicated in the
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick
icy conditions.
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to accelerator pedal.
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
— If Equipped
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time allwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast to wheels with traction.
driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems
are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
provide improved throttle response and modified shift- where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road
ing for an enhanced driving experience, as well the Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be information.
activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on
the instrument panel switch bank.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) — If Equipped
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
mode positions:
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated • All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
by the AWD Control Switch, which is located on the
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
center console.
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction.
AWD Control Switch (Three-Position)
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting instructions. The LOW RANGE position is designed
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the
LOW RANGE position on dry hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
Panel” for further information. When you select a different transfer case position, the position indicator lights
will do the following:
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD 1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the Driver
ON.
Information Display (DID) and indicate the current and
desired transfer case selection. Refer to “Driver Informa- 2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
3. The transfer case will not shift.
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
WARNING! (Continued)
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
the control knob back to the current position, wait five injury.
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requireNOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
damage to driveline components.
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the electronic
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine speed is approximately three times that of the
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means
AWD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not
that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning propto overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
erly and that service is required.
(40 km/h).
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light”
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
(Continued)
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction, Neutral (N)
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
Neutral – This range disengages both the front and rear
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
For additional information on the appropriate use of each towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
transfer case mode position, see the information below: Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
AWD Auto
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range – This range sends power to
the rear wheels. The all-wheel drive system will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
LOW Range
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure
AWD Auto To Low Range
NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi- Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require- the following procedures:
ments for the selected position have been met. To retry a
Preferred Procedure
shift: return the control knob back to the original position, make certain all shift requirements have been met, 1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
wait five seconds and try the shift again.
NOTE:
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
position have been met, the current position indicator
3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
the desired position.
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
• The ignition switch must be in the RUN position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the RUN
2. With the ignition switch in ON/ RUN position and
position, then the shift will not take place and no
engine running, shift the transmission to Neutral.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Alternate Procedure
3. Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position. NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not For information regarding the transfer case NEUTRAL N
shift procedure. Refer to “Shifting Into NEUTRAL N” in
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
“Recreational Towing”.
NOTE:
• If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift
attempt is in process, the desired position indicator
light will flash continuously while the original position
indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been
met.
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary vehicles.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
When off-road driving, shift to LOW for additional considered before entering the water.
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
CAUTION!
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
LOW range.
When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
CAUTION! (Continued)
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream
of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
Flowing Water
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to preIf the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off), vent component damage.
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid
depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The flowing water can
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer
to “All-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear
than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-revving
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first
gear and LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always After Driving Off-Road
drive straight up or down.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a can get any problems taken care of right away and have
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide your vehicle ready when you need it.
traction to complete the climb.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Traction Downhill
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
speed and direction.
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
values specified in the Service Manual.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis- • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
sion whenever possible.
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer
Programmable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF
– SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed
within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake” Warning Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake” Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake” Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
Support (RBS), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
short time after the stop).
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started • Brake pedal pulsations.
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
WARNING!
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa- • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
tion(s).
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
WARNING!
repaired as soon as possible.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
Brake Assist System (BAS)
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, insystem detects an emergency braking situation by sens- cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroapplies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the the safety of others.
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
roll down the hill as normal.
will remain active.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
(Continued)
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Disabling And Enabling HSA
4. Start the engine.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
current setting, proceed as follows:
turn to the left.
• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display
bank below the climate control four times within
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
further information.
turn on and turn off two times.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruadditional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
ment Panel” for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the
back to the ON position. If the sequence was comfollowing steps:
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
maintain the desired path.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ- path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen- the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approtial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the understeer condition.
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” loThis system enhances directional control and stability of
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC coras the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Traction Control System (TCS)
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
ESC On
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode.
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this return to ESC On.
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
NOTE:
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
Partial Off
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
by the ESC system is reduced.
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC Operating Modes
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Full Off – If Equipped
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In • In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again, ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
ESC OFF Indicator Light
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
running.
If
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
equipped.
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this NOTE:
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenspeeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authotarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
that caused the ESC activation.
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
customer has elected to have the Electronic
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condispeed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMoccur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckoccurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as user’s safety or the safety of others.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
or other vehicles.
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excesNOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
available ESC modes.
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer
and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations.
Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further
information.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/ occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being panic stop.
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
WARNING!
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windIf TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
no driver interaction is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS Tire Markings
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
5
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo NOTE:
and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
(294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [294 kg]).
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
• For the following example, the combined weight of
calculated in step 4.
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
(Continued)
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
NOTE:
ride.
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause Tire Inflation Pressures
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
vehicle to drift left or right.
door.
Fuel Economy
At least once a month:
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Repair
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to
the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
Tire Types
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informaAll Season Tires — If Equipped
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
Snow Tires
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
If you need snow tires, select tires checked before using these tire types.
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
mode.
Wheel — If Equipped
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforYour vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
mation.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
Spare Tires — If Equipped
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
tire rotation pattern.
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
WARNING!
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
of unapproved tires and wheels may change susthis manual for more information relating to the Load
pension dimensions and performance characterisIndex and Speed Symbol of a tire.
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
(Continued)
Replacement Tires
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the THULE XG-12 PRO
traction device or equivalent is recommended on
P265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
(Continued)
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
unequal rates.
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
5
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotation
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
recommended cold tire placard pressure.
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
readings to the Receiver Module.
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
the proper pressure.
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Informafollowing components:
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
• Receiver Module
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, increased pressure.
which display in the Driver Information Display
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
(DID), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
threshold for any reason, including low temperature updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended (parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
turned off.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pres- tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
sure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the cold tire pressure value.
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
(Continued)
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
the proper pressure.
readings to the Receiver Module.
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, BAR or kPa.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Driver Information Display
(DID), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
DID will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message, an ⬙Inflate to
XXX⬙ message and a graphic display of the pressure Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
value(s) with the low tire(s) displayed in a different color. active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the a chime. The DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSgraphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
pressure displayed in the ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message.
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display
of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
that affects radio wave signals.
Service TPM System Warning
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
housings.
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. remain on solid, and the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds and then disNOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
play dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
update automatically.
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
sound, and the DID will still display a pressure value in will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a
the different color graphic display and an ⬙Inflate to XXX new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
kPa⬙ message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.6L Engine — If Equipped
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
fuel economy and performance when us2. This device must accept any interference received,
ing high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoincluding interference that may cause undesired opline having an octane rating of 87 as specieration.
fied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved “Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over
by the party responsible for compliance could void the “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. PropWhile operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making components.
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
genates such as ethanol.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
CAUTION!
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso- system components. Problems that result from running
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
these blends may result in starting and drivability and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
problems, damage critical fuel system components, Limited Warranty.
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoshould clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Operate in a lean mode.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
Materials Added To Fuel
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits. When
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
5
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the •
pipe seals the system.
•
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the nozzle
opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
•
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
•
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
•
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait 5 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
Pour fuel into funnel opening.
Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the
fuel door latch to the closed position.
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
Release Cable
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
be manually returned to the closed position.
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so Tire Size
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
Payload
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the Rim Size
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
listed.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front Inflation Pressure
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the Curb Weight
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in- of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi- capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
cle’s GVWR.
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
added.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined the brakes operate.
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Loading
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information
further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this ready for operation⬙ condition.
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Common Towing Definitions
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
TRAILER TOWING
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
(Continued)
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle Tongue Weight (TW)
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
the load on your vehicle.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles Frontal Area
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- maximum width of the front of a trailer.
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
Trailer Sway Control
information.
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric- tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it proany unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
the most popular on the market today and they are comWARNING!
monly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
(Continued)
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine
Model
GCWR (Gross
Combined Wt.
Rating)
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L
RWD Light
Duty Cooling
8,900 lbs
(4,037 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1,588 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
3.6L
RWD
11,600 lbs
(5,262 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs
(2,812 kg)
620 lbs
(281 kg)
3.6L
AWD Light
Duty Cooling
8,900 lbs
(4,037 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1,588 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
3.6L
AWD
11,600 lbs
(5,262 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs
(2,812 kg)
620 lbs
(281 kg)
Frontal Area
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
GCWR (Gross
Combined Wt.
Rating)
Engine
Model
5.7L
RWD
13,100 lbs
(5,942 kg)
5.7L
AWD
13,100 lbs
(5,942 kg)
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
7,400 lbs
(3,357 kg)
740 lbs
(336 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
7,200 lbs
(3,266 kg)
720 lbs
(327 kg)
Frontal Area
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may
be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lbs (1 769 kg).
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety • Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further
are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
information. The addition of passengers and cargo may
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer
hitch receiver (if equipped). This cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover outward
(towards you).
5
Hitch Receiver Cover Retainers
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you) NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at the cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure in factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
reverse order.
Hitch Receiver Cover
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In- Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance Schedformation Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for ule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
further information.
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed
the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
(Continued)
5
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
brake controller is not required.
proper inspection procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
5
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
AutoStick
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping • When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
traffic.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
Automatic Transmission
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necesfrequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
conditions allow.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor- Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
provide better engine braking.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to SNOW PLOW
maximize fuel efficiency.
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
Cooling System
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overfront end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectheating, take the following actions:
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
NONE
Rear-Wheel
Drive
Models
NOT
ALLOWED
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed
Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer
Rear
ALL
NOT
ALLOWED
OK
OK
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Two-Speed Transfer Case
•
•
•
•
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
5
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL(N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
(Continued)
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer
to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
5. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
8. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL,
NOTE:
push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine turns off. Turning the engine off will auto- • Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
matically place the transmission in PARK.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
11. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button again (withIf any of these requirements are not met before pushout pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
ignition to the OFF position.
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
CAUTION!
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
•
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for a
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transshift to take place and for the position indicator lights
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
position, the shift will not take place and no position
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lorelease the NEUTRAL (N) button.
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
STARTING AND OPERATING 573
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the NOTE:
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
selector switch.
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
9. Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
OFF.
If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
10. Release the brake pedal.
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
12. Start the engine.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for a
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
14. Release the parking brake.
to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN
position, the shift will not take place and no position
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
䡵 CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
. . .594
. . .595
. . .596
. . .598
. . .600
. . .601
. . .602
6
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .606 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
▫ Rear Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . .610
▫ All-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may discharge the battery.
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
6
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WARNING!
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Jack Location
6
Thumb Screw Location
Jack Storage Location
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
Spare Tire Location
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the
winch stops.
6
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it 5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull
vertically behind the rear bumper.
the metal stamping toward you to release it from the
plastic plate.
Spare Tire
Tab Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube 7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the
and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push
protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
it through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
6
Releasing Protective Plate
Sleeve And Cable
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
ample, if changing the right front tire,
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
block the left rear wheel.
areas.
Preparations For Jacking
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
(Continued)
6
Jack Warning Label
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack And Tool Assembly
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body flange just 4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
behind the front tire. Do not raise the vehicle until
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire. Do not
you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
6
Front Jack Location
Rear Jacking Location
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from
inside the aluminum road wheel and position the
wheel behind the rear bumper with the “beauty side”
facing rearward.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to Torque
Specifications in this section for proper lug nut torque.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
6
“Beauty Side”
NOTE: The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel from
being scratched when sliding it under the vehicle.
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective 12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protecplate in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end
tive plate until it is directly under the winch and
of the winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped
between the rear bumper and exhaust system heat
cone shape wheel plate though the road wheel and
shields. Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on
protective plate.
the winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
Installing Winch
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the 14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack
in the rear storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mechanism.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the
flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools
in the bag underneath the others. Use the Velcro
straps to secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug
wrench on the forward side of the jack. Expand the
jack on the bracket by turning the thumb screw
clockwise until it is tight to prevent rattles.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire,
jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with
the jack and tire changing tools. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel
into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating ” in this
manual.
handle counterclockwise.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Fuel Funnel
6
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenRemote Battery Posts
ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the either vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
6
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jump-Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
WARNING! (Continued)
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2000
rpm since it provides no charging benefit, wastes
fuel and can damage booster vehicle engine.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested
in the reverse sequence:
at your authorized dealer.
6
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability
Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further inforcan often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
6
602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use MANUAL PARK RELEASE
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
6
Release Latch
Manual Park Release Cover
604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can
be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
Released Position
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605
6
Release Latch
Stowed Position
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks in place.
into position.
606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled may also be towed as described under “Recreational
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the trans- Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF
the Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
If Transmission Is
Operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance
All-Wheel Drive
Models With SingleSpeed Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
See Instructions:
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF
the Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
Wheel Lift
or Dolly
Tow
Front
If Transmission Is
Operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Flatbed
Rear
ALL
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
All-Wheel Drive
Models With SingleSpeed Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
6
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) Rear Wheel Drive Models
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
position, not the ACC position.
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmisdischarged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUfor towing.
TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels on the ground.
All-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed
instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Refer to the Owner’s Manual on the DVD
for further details regarding the Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Refer to the Owner’s Manual on the DVD
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .615
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
▫ Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . .666
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
▫ Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . .668
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps . . . . . .668
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .668
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps
(Bi-Xenon) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Engine Oil Dipstick
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Coolant Pressure Cap (Reservoir)
Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
6
7
8
9
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminals
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
WARNING!
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
PROGRAMS
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
tracking device, it may:
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
For states that require an Inspection and Maintesafety related systems, could be impaired or a
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
stored in your vehicle systems, including per- system is ready for testing.
sonal information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
check.
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine DEALER SERVICE
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personRegardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced available which include detailed service information for
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine attempting any procedure yourself.
running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five Change Engine Oil
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informamaintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the tion.
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interthe bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
top of the safe zone on these engines.
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
This symbol means that the oil has equivalent is recommended for all operating temperabeen certified by the American tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
Petroleum Institute (API). The and vehicle fuel economy.
manufacturer only recommends
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
API Certified engine oils.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W- engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en- partment” illustration in this section.
gine oils.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
CAUTION!
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the meeting MS-6395 is not available.
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certinot covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numMOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
ber should not be used.
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera- Materials Added To Engine Oil
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adand vehicle fuel economy.
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on performance may be impaired by supplemental addiengine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com- tives.
partment” illustration in this section.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Oper- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
ating” for further information.
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte- The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a —
If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf —
If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low
GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system maintenance intervals.
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
7
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, partially close
the glove compartment door and push inward to
release the glove compartment travel stop on one side
and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart- 1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment door.
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining
tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on 6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the right side to fully remove the cover.
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover,
make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove
compartment door hinge and reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in
the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechathe glove compartment travel stops.
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
Body Lubrication
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
Windshield Wiper Blades
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulathe application of any lubricant, the parts concerned tions of salt or road film.
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
7
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
Removing The Wiper Blade
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
place.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
Adding Washer Fluid
This vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information containers.
Display (DID), the DID will indicate when the washer
fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid
level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic
outline and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be
displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
Cooling System
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
WARNING!
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If down the face of the condenser.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
(Continued)
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
Please review these recommendations for using Organic NOTE:
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
level of protection against freezing according to the
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
operated.
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma- • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
terial Standard MS.90032.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
local authorized dealer.
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
dealer for assistance.
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionOAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
possible.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
WARNING! (Continued)
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding spills immediately.
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Coolant Level
Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
a month.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
for leaks.
system components should be inspected periodically.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to maintenance intervals.
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum comWARNING!
ponents.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” mark
and a “MIN” mark. The fluid level must be kept within
these two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark,
because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
Transfer Case
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in Fluid Level Check
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
CAUTION!
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
Adding Fluid
and cause them to leak.
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
Selection Of Lubricant
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
Drain
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MaintainFirst remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recoming Your Vehicle” for further information.
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to any special additives in the transmission.
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. product and its performance may be impaired by suppleRefer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addisection for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain tives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealthe transmission fluid at the correct level using the ers as they may adversely affect seals.
recommended fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. HowIf you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
disassembled for any reason.
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permapackaged and sealed.
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to this finish.
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
directly on the mirror.
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Glass Surfaces
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
7
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F03
F05
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
–
Description
Radiator Fan
Compressor for Air Suspension If Equipped
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F06
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
F07
F09
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F17
F19
F20
F22
F23
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability
Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only) / Brake
Vacuum Pump
Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
Trailer Tow Electric Brake - If Equipped
Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4 / Exterior Lighting #1
Headlamp Washer- If Equipped
Headrest Solenoid- If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights #1
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
Cavity
F24
F25
F26
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
F28
F29
F30
F32
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/
Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower Motor - If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC - If Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
7
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F42
F44
F49
F50
F51
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
F52
F53
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
F56
F57
F58
F59
F60
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Description
Horn
Diagnostic Port
Integrated Central Stack / Climate Control
Air Suspension Control Module - If Equipped
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition /
Steering Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights If Equipped
Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
NOX Sensor
HID Headlamps LH - If Equipped
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
Cavity
F61
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F62
F63
F64
F66
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
F67
–
15 Amp Blue
F68
F69
F70
F71
F72
F73
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Description
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain
Sensor
CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed - If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
PCM (If Equipped)
HID Headlamp RH - If Equipped
7
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F75
F76
F77
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F78
F80
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F81
F82
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F83
F84
F85
F86
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Dual Batt Control (If Equipped)
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering
Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass /
Anti-Intrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module/ Cruise
Control / DTV
Fuel Door
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
Cavity
F87
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F88
F90/F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
F96
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F97
–
20 Amp Yellow
F98
F99
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
Description
Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow /
Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp - If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Shifter / Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera / ParkSense
Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp Charger If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped
Front Heated Seats - If Equipped
Climate Control / Driver Assistance Systems
Module / DSRC
7
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F100
F101
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F103
F104
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Active Damping - If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center
Console)
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 Interior Bulbs
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
Glove Compartment
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Lamp
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
Grab Handle Lamp
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Overhead Console
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Reading Lamps
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Visor Vanity Lamp
possibility of compressor damage when the system is Rear Cargo Lamp
started again.
Underpanel Courtesy
Lamps
Instrument Cluster
(General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
V26377
214–2
906
103
74
7
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (BiXenon) Headlamps
Low Beam/High Beam/
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Bi-Halogen
Headlamps (Base)
Low Beam/High Beam (BiHalogen) Headlamps (Uplevel)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
(Base)
Front Turn Signal Lamps
(Uplevel & Premium)
Front Park Lamp/Daytime
Running Lamp (Uplevel &
Premium)
Bulb Number
D3S (Service at Authorized Dealer)
9005SL+
Front Side Marker Lamps
9005SL+
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
3157NAK
Rear Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Tail Lamps/Sidemarker
Lamps
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps
3157NAK
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
Bulb Number
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
H11
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (Bi-Xenon)
— If Equipped
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not
system charges.
attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a
headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service.
7
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock in
1. Turn the steering wheel to the left to replace the bulb
place.
from the right hand lamp, or to the right to replace the
bulb from the left hand lamp.
8. Install the bulb access cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
2. Turn the access cap located on the wheel liner counterclockwise to remove from liner.
9. Install the access cap in the wheel liner and rotate
clockwise to lock it in place.
3. Locate the headlamp bulb access cap through the
opening in the wheel liner.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
CAUTION!
4. Firmly grasp the access cap and rotate counterclockwise to remove lamp housing.
5. Firmly grasp the low/high beam bulb and connector
assembly and rotate counterclockwise to remove from
housing.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector and then connect
the replacement bulb.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
Front Turn Signal
Front Fog Lamps
1. Open the hood.
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn countercounterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp
clockwise to remove from housing.
housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
2. Remove the bulb from the connector and install the
bulb.
replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
(Continued)
7
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are LED. See
Rear License Lamp
your authorized dealer for replacement.
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps
dealer for replacement.
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter clockwise.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) –
Without Trailer Tow Package
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) –
With Trailer Tow Package
U.S.
Metric
24.6 Gallons
93.0 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
10.4 Quarts
9.9 Liters
11 Quarts
10.4 Liters
7
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
U.S.
15.4 Quarts
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
16 Quarts
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) –
With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
14.6 Liters
15.2 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
Component
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR,
Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR,
Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
7
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3,
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
8
676 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
concern for fleet customers.
scheduled maintenance.
Severe Duty All Models
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser- Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is Duty.
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as • Check engine oil level
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check windshield washer fluid level
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
wear or damage
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 677
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
678 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, offroad or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs.**
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 679
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
680 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .683
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .684
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .684
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .685
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .688
9
682 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .689
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 683
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
9
684 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the • Authorized dealer name
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized FCA US LLC Customer Center
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
solved with this process.
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Phone: (800) 423-6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, P.O. Box 1621
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 685
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
686 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only We appreciate that you have made a major investment
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
have any questions about the service contract, call the sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer concerns.
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
WARNING!
Service Contract
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
(Continued)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 687
WARNING! (Continued)
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR PARTS
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminoperating at its best.
hpistrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
9
688 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
You can also obtain other information about motor NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
Service Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 689
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv- DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete TIRE QUALITY GRADES
list of all tools and equipment.
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
Owner’s Manuals
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
your vehicle.
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce- All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
9
690 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving Temperature Grades
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
teristics and climate.
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
Traction Grades
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforpassenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
mance.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
WARNING!
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
WARNING!
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
peak traction characteristics.
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
(Continued)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 691
WARNING! (Continued)
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
694 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .196
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 70
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 610
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 610
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 111, 294
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .623
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 626
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .423, 425
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625, 626
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416, 625
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 297
INDEX 695
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637, 669
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .407, 416
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466, 647
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646, 647
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646, 673
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .256
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299, 624
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 673
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490, 642
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
10
696 INDEX
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663, 665
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 544
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .616
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .99
INDEX 697
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .98
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .90
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .86
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .640
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636, 641
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .637, 669, 670
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319, 322
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
10
698 INDEX
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .35
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 35
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.327
.327
.481
.381
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .256
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case. . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191, 192, 196
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .302
INDEX 699
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .616
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 614
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 614
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 544
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 669
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619, 669
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620, 669, 670
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 622
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Enhanced Accident Response Feature. . . . . . . . .79, 610
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 544
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 634
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 663
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 626
10
700 INDEX
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 318, 667, 668
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .670
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 669
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
INDEX 701
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.242
.540
.539
.540
.468
.539
.653
.552
.551
.548
Hazard Warning Flasher
Headlights . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.577
.665
.174
.666
.652
.175
.182
.666
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 275
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 123
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290, 298, 303, 318
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .184
10
702 INDEX
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions . . . . . . . . .586
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580, 586
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 352
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 352
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .20, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .20, 26
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Keyless Enter-N-Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
INDEX 703
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .306
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 173
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 111, 294
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317, 321
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 240
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319, 322
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 173, 318, 667, 668
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .298, 318
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665, 666
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
10
704 INDEX
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 123
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618, 687
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .306, 616
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
INDEX 705
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327, 619
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620, 669
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 622, 669
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .6, 688
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .513
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
10
706 INDEX
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .256
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 145
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486, 673
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .640
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 20, 28, 32, 42
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
INDEX 707
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .569
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .572
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .20, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .20, 26
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .403
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .32, 354
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 354
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
10
708 INDEX
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 54, 56
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Seat Belt
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .59
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .62
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 143, 144, 145, 150
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145, 146
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 111
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .59
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
INDEX 709
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 297
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463, 466
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 318, 667, 668
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523, 524, 525, 582
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670, 673
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193, 195
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .191, 192, 196
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 454
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458, 463
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
10
710 INDEX
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189 Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 517, 523, 689
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .403
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580, 594
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423, 663
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517, 523
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .68
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512, 513
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .416
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528, 594
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .512, 513
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
INDEX 711
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505, 517
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523, 524, 525, 582
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551, 606
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .566
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466, 646
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . .242
10
712 INDEX
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 26
Customer Programmable Features . . . .35, 37, 46, 352
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . .35, 37, 46, 352
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .24
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 352
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 667, 668 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .32, 354 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 32, 354 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513, 548
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .21
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423, 663
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 622
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
INDEX 713
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 633
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 254
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2016 Durango
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2016
16WD01-126-AB
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Durango
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising